Canon | XEED WUX500 | User manual | Canon XEED WUX500 User manual

Canon XEED WUX500 User manual
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺷﻜﺮًﺍ ﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻳُﻌﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ‪) WUX500‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ "ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ"( ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻣﺰﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ‪ .WUX500‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ .Canon‬ﻭﺇﻥ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪Selecting Screen Aspect‬‬
‫‪Select the correct aspect ratio for the screen which is used.‬‬
‫‪Press the MENU button to display the menu window.‬‬
‫‪Projector‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪Remote control‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻤﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪٢.......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ‪٤...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ‪١٨ .............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪١٩ ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪٢٤ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ‪٢٥ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪٢٦ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪٢٩ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪٣٣ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٣٦ ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٤٠ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ‪٤١ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٤٢ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪٤٣ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٤٥ ................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ‪٤٧ ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪٥٠ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪٥٣ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪٥٦ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪٥٨ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺴﻤﺔ‪٥٩ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪٦٠ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ‪٦١ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ‪٦٢ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪٦٣ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‪٦٨ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪٧٥ .............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪٧٨ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻳُﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻷﻋﻮﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﺤﺴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺍ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ "ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ(‪ .‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺄﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ ﺧﻄﺮﺓ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍء ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪.ANSI / NFPA 75 ،‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫• ﻳُﺼﺪﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺿﻮءًﺍ ً‬
‫ﻛﺜﻴﻔﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺤﺪﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﻌﻴﻨﻴﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﻖ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﻣﻬﻤًﺎ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‬
‫• ﺇﻥ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺧﻠﻔﻬﺎ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ً‬
‫ﻭﺗﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﻐﻠﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﻻ ِ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ‪ً LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻘﻒ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻘﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣًﺎ ﻣﻜﻨﺴﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻔﻪ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻛﺎﺭﺛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺯﻳﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﺦ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻛﺎﺭﺛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺰﻳﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺾ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫■ ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ً‬
‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ً‬
‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻳﺮﻭﺳﻮﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺭﻃﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﺴﻴﺤﻮﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺸﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ‪ ...‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻃﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﺭﺿﻲ ﺭﻃﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺣﻤﺎﻡ ﺳﺒﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪...‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻀﺪﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻐﻴﻦ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺟﺴﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻴﻌﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺠﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻘﻼﺏ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺛﻮﻕ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺭﻳﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻮﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻐﻠﻖ ﻛﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻴﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻣﺘﺄﻛ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗُﺤﻤﱢﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻌﺮﺿﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﻓﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ ﺧﻄﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻦ ﺑﺄﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﻦ ﺑﺄﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺮﺍء ﺳﻠﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺴﻜﺎﺏ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫـ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻏﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻏﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻓﺤﻮﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺁﻣﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺪﻓﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ ﺧﻄﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗُﺤﺪﺙ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺴﻜﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻳﻔﻲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻳﺘﻪ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣُﺮﻛﺒًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )‪(Wi-Fi‬‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻙ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳُﺴﻤﺢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻝ ﻭﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫‪) WUX500‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪.(ZC-ST :WLAN‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪Complies with‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ WLAN‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ‬
‫‪IDA Standards‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻨﻐﺎﻓﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪DB00671‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‬
Canon Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že tento ZC-ST je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími
příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Undertegnede Canon Inc. erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr ZC-ST overholder de
væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Hiermit erklärt Canon Inc., dass sich das Gerät ZC-ST in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden
Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.
Käesolevaga kinnitab Canon Inc. seadme ZC-ST vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele
ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
Hereby, Canon Inc., declares that this ZC-ST is in compliance with the essential requirements
and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Por medio de la presente Canon Inc. declara que el ZC-ST cumple con los requisitos
esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Canon Inc. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ ZC-ST ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ
ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.
Par la présente Canon Inc. déclare que l’appareil ZC-ST est conforme aux exigences
essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Con la presente Canon Inc. dichiara che questo ZC-ST è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed
alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Ar šo Canon Inc. deklarē, ka ZC-ST atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un
citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.
Šiuo Canon Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis ZC-ST atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB
Direktyvos nuostatas.
Hierbij verklaart Canon Inc. dat het toestel ZC-ST in overeenstemming is met de essentiële
eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Hawnhekk, Canon Inc., jiddikjara li dan ZC-ST jikkonforma mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma
provvedimenti oħrajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
Alulírott, Canon Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a ZC-ST megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ
követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Niniejszym Canon Inc. oświadcza, że ZC-ST jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz
pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Canon Inc. declara que este ZC-ST está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras
disposições da Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Canon Inc. izjavlja, da je ta ZC-ST v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi
določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Canon Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že ZC-ST spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné
ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.
Canon Inc. vakuuttaa täten että ZC-ST tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten
vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
Härmed intygar Canon Inc. att denna ZC-ST står I överensstämmelse med de väsentliga
egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
Hér með lýsir Canon Inc. yfir því að ZC-ST er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar kröfur, sem
gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
Canon Inc. erklærer herved at utstyret ZC-ST er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og
øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
С настоящия документ Canon Inc. декларира, че ZC-ST е в съгласие с основните
изисквания и съответните постановления на Директива 1999/5/ЕС.
Prin prezenta, Canon Inc. declară că acest ZC-ST este conform cu cerinţele principale şi cu
celelalte prevederi relevante ale Directivei 1999/5/EC.
:‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‬
CANON EUROPA N.V.
‫ ﻫﻮﻟﻨﺪﺍ‬،Bovenkerkerweg 59, 1185 XB Amstelveen
CANON INC.
30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
١١
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻃﺊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻃﺊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻈﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺃﺯﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻘﻼﺏ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ ﻭﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻛﻪ ﻳﺘﻌﻘﺪ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻤﺪ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺳﺠﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻃﻴﻪ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻨﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺬﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺍﻓﺊ ﻭﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻒ‪ .‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺳﻠﻚ ﺑﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺣﺼﺮﻱ‪ .‬ﻓﻼ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺃﺭﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺣﺘﻮﺍء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺁﻣﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻔﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ )‪ ٢٤٠ -١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺤﺐ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻭﻳﺪﺍﻙ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺘﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺎ ﺃﻭ ً‬
‫• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺨﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺤﻤﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﺎﺋﻼ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻓﺼﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻜﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻼء‬
‫‪.Canon‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻻﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻛﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻛﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺸﺘﻌﻞ ﻣُﺴﺒﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺨﺎﺧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺼﺪﻭﺭ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺿﻮء ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻭﺛﺒﺎﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻘﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻘﻒ )ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺯﺋﺒﻖ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻪ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻣًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﺩﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ )ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﺣﺒﻪ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﺢ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ" )ﺹ‪.((٦٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺑﺂﺧﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻵﺧﺮ ً‬
‫ﻭﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻌﻄﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺑﻮﻗﺖ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻌ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﺛﺮ ﺷﻈﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺠﺮﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻓﺤﺼﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻄﻠﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﻋﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻼء ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻘﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻒ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺃﺳﻔﻠﻪ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ )ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ( ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺍﻓﺬ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻮﺍﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺸﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻤﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺨﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗُﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﻜﻜﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻔﺮﻍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻛﻠﺘﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ +‬ﻭ‪ -‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺃﻱ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ﺟﻠﺪﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﻄﻒ ﺟﻠﺪﻙ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻡ ﻭﺣﻮﻟﻬﺎ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻟﻚ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻮﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﺦ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻃﻴﺐ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺠﻠﺲ‪/‬ﺗﻘﻒ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻨﻘﻠﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﺋﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﻼﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺳﺎﻃﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻨﻊ‬
‫ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﻇﻠﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺒﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ٍ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ ً‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻘﻠﺒﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺗﻐﻠﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻤﺘﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺤﻨﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺷﻈﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻡ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻳﺪﺍﻙ ﻣﻜﺸﻮﻓﺘﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﺒﺨﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ"‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪.Canon‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻨﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺴﺠﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﺍﻹﺳﻔﻨﺠﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻡ ﺑﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺳﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﻃﺐ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺘﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﺎﺋﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺣﻤﻞ‪/‬ﺷﺤﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻡ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺗﻚ "ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ" ﻭ"ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ" )ﺹ‪ – ٤‬ﺹ‪ .(١٨‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﺮﺗﻄﻢ ﺑﺸﻲء ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺎﺋﻼ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮًﺍ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻘﻼﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻡ ﺑﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‬
‫■ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺜﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺸﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺑﺨﺮﺓ ﺯﻳﺘﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺳﺠﺎﺋﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺼﺎﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻳﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺪ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ٍ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻄﺢ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﺎﺟﻴﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻭﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٤٠ -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪٪٨٥‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ ١٠-‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ – ‪ ٦٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺣﻤﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫■ ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻳﺪﺍﻙ ﻣﻜﺸﻮﻓﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻳﺪﺍﻙ ﻣﻜﺸﻮﻓﺘﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻠﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺣﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ‪ ،(٤٦‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻴﺪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻱ )‪.(١٠‬‬
‫■ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻡ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺰﺍﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻑ ﻟﻠﻜﺘﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺿﻴﻘﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺭﺩﻳﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺊ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪) .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺰﻝ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺳﻢ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺧﻠﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫■ ﺍﺣﺬﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻣﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﺒﺨﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٣٠٠‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ٢٣٠٠‬ﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ]‪/Fan mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪/Install settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫■ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻘﻒ‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻘﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ٍ‬
‫ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻡ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪ .‬ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻜﻨﺴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫■ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻷﻱ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ*‪ ،١‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪/Install settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ[ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ]‪/Vertical projection‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪/Install settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ[ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ .‬ﺑﻞ ﺍﻃﻠﺐ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪.Canon‬‬
‫‪°١٠ °١٠‬‬
‫‪°١٠ °١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻣﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺿﻌﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻣﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ً‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻒ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪°١٠‬‬
‫‪°١٠‬‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻄﺮﻕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻘﻒ )ﺹ‪.(٧٨‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻳﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ]‪/Install settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ[ < ]‪/Professional settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ[ < ]‪/Vertical projection‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪ Ethernet‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Xerox Corporation‬‬
‫‪ Microsoft‬ﻭ‪ Windows‬ﻭ‪ Windows Vista‬ﻭ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ Windows 8‬ﻭ‪Windows 8.1‬‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻤﻠﻮﻛﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Mac‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS‬ﻭ‪ Macintosh‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻤﻠﻮﻛﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ ،Apple Inc.‬ﻭﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ‪ High Definition Multimedia Interface‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ ‪.HDMI Licensing, LLC.‬‬
‫‪ PJLink‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ ‪ JBMIA‬ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ PJLink‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻤﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ AMX‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.AMX Corporation‬‬
‫®‪ Crestron‬ﻭ®‪ Crestron RoomView‬ﻭ™‪ Crestron Connected‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Crestron Electronics, Inc.‬‬
‫™‪ HDBaseT‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDBaseT Alliance‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ ‪.HDBaseT Alliance‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ ‪.Wi-Fi Alliance‬‬
‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ Wi-Fi Certified‬ﻭ‪ WPA‬ﻭ‪ WPA2‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ Wi-Fi Certified‬ﺑﺎﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻃﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi Alliance‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﺻﺤﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﺮﺍ ﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﻬﻢ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Canon‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﻘﺪﺭ ﺗﻔﻬﻤﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Canon‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ‬
‫‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻸﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺠﻤﻬﻮﺭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "‪"ThirdPartySoftware.pdf‬‬
‫)ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ OpenSourceSoftware‬ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ LICENSE‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪ GNU‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪ GNU‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻣﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺿﻤﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺴﻢ "ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ" ﻭ"ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﻋﻢ" ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﻳﻦ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪ GNU‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻮﻝ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳُﻨﺺ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫"ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ" ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍء ﺃﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺻﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻤﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻻ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺃﻧﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺩﺍﺋﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻚ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻃﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﻟﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺄﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﺤﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺎﺭﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻻﺣﻘﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻻ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﺮ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻜﺒﺪﻫﺎ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﻼﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﻋﻢ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Canon Inc.‬ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻓﺮﻭﻋﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺯﻋﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﻮﻥ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻱ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ‬
‫ﺗُﺠﻴﺐ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Canon Inc.‬ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻓﺮﻭﻋﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺯﻋﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﻮﻥ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺗﻄﺮﺣﻬﺎ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻼء‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫)‪ ٢‬ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪(AAA‬‬
‫)ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ‪(RS-RC06 :‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪ .(RS-RC05‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺩﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ RS-RC05‬ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )‪ ١٫٨‬ﻡ(‬
‫)ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ D-sub‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ‪ ١٥‬ﺳ ًﻨﺎ‪/‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ D-sub‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ‪ ١٥‬ﺳ ًﻨﺎ(‬
‫• ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪ ١٫٨‬ﻡ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﻛﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫• ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫• ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ(‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫■ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺛﻠﻤﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬
‫ﻭﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫■ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫‪ AAA‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﻦ ‪ +‬ﻭ– ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ ﺗﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻠﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺘﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﻜﺐ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺎﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫‪٨‬ﻡ‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫‪٨‬ﻡ‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ ٢٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺎﺋﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻮء ﻗﻮﻱ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(٣‬‬
‫)‪ (٥‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) D.ZOOM‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﻗﻤﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺿﻌﻔﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺣﺘﻰ ‪١٢‬‬
‫]ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫]ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ(‪.‬‬
‫]ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [ ‪:[ ] / [ ] / [ ] /‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(٨‬‬
‫)‪(٩‬‬
‫)‪(٢‬‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫)‪ (٦‬ﺯﺭ ‪) IMAGE‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( )ﺹ‪(٥٦‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٧‬ﺯﺭ ‪) GAMMA‬ﺟﺎﻣﺎ(‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫)‪ (٨‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) INPUT‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ( )ﺹ‪(٤١‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٩‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) AUTO PC‬ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺹ‪(٤٥‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ )ﺇﻟﺦ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺧﻞ ‪ PC‬ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫)‪(٧‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺯﺭ ‪) POWER‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( )ﺹ‪ ،٤٠‬ﺹ‪(٦٠‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺯﺭ ‪) BLANK‬ﻓﺎﺭﻍ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ‪/‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﺯﺭ ‪) ASPECT‬ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫)‪(١‬‬
‫)‪ (٤‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) KEYSTONE‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( )ﺹ‪(٥٣‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪/Keystone‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ[‬
‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ‪/‬ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ )ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫)‪ (١٤‬ﺯﺭ ‪) EXIT‬ﺧﺮﻭﺝ(‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (١٥‬ﺯﺭ ‪) VOL‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪:[+‬‬
‫ﻟﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]–[‪:‬‬
‫)‪(١٠‬‬
‫)‪(١١‬‬
‫)‪ (١٦‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) TEST PATTERN‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ(‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(١٢‬‬
‫)‪ (١٧‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MUTE‬ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﻟﻜﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(١٣‬‬
‫)‪ (١٨‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SPLIT‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(١٤‬‬
‫)‪ (١٩‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) Fn‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻪ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(١٥‬‬
‫)‪ (٢٠‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ECO‬ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ( )ﺹ‪(٥٨‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Eco‬ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ( ﻻﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(١٦‬‬
‫)‪(١٧‬‬
‫)‪(١٨‬‬
‫)‪(١٩‬‬
‫)‪(٢٠‬‬
‫)‪ (١٠‬ﺯﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (١١‬ﺯﺭ ‪) FREEZE‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (١٢‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (١٣‬ﺯﺭ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﺹ‪(٢٦‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‬
‫ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء)ﺹ‪(٦٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ • ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﺹ‪(٢٦‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻗﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ‪(٤٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ )ﺹ‪(٣٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫)‪(١‬‬
‫)‪(٣) (٢‬‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺯﺭ ‪) POWER‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( )ﺹ‪ ،٤٠‬ﺹ‪(٦٠‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(٧‬‬
‫)‪ (٥‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪) VOL /‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫] [ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ :VOL+‬ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫] [ﺍﻟﺰﺭ –‪ :VOL‬ﻟﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) INPUT‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ( )ﺹ‪(٤١‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) AUTO PC‬ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺹ‪(٤٥‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ )ﺇﻟﺦ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫‪ PC‬ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٦‬ﺯﺭ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٤‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) KEYSTONE‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( )ﺹ‪(٥٣‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٧‬ﺯﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ‪LED‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ‪ LED‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﻣﻄﻔﺄﺓ ‪ /‬ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ ‪ /‬ﻭﺍﻣﻀﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) POWER ON‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )ﺃﺧﻀﺮ( ‪ :‬ﻳﻀﻲء ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﻀﻲء ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) WARNING‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ( )ﺃﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﻀﻲء ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) LAMP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ( )ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫• ‪) TEMP‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ( )ﺃﺣﻤﺮ( ‪ :‬ﻳﻀﻲء ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫■ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪LED‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ LED‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻀﺊ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪) POWER ON‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ؛‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪LED‬‬
‫‪WARNING POWER‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ(‬
‫‪) ON‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫)ﺃﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫)ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‬
‫‪LAMP‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ(‬
‫)ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫‪TEMP‬‬
‫)ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ(‬
‫)ﺃﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻄﻔﺄ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻀﻲء‬
‫‪ :‬ﻭﺍﻣﺾ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ )ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺒﻂء‪) :‬ﻛﻞ ‪ٍ ٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻴﻪ )ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‪ :‬ﻛﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻮﻋﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪) .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻮﻋﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪) .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪) LAMP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ( ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﺾ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻮﻋﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﺢ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺑﺂﺧﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ”ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ“ )ﺹ‪.(١٩‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻃﻔﺎء ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺇﺳﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺋﺮ ﻭﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ‪ ،٤٣‬ﺹ‪(٤٦‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ‪ /‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻹﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٤٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻠﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫■ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻘﻠﺒﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻭﺛﺒﺎﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪ُ ،RS-FT01‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺛﺒﱢﺖ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫)‪(٢‬‬
‫)‪(٢‬‬
‫)‪(١‬‬
‫)‪(١‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ )‪(١‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺭﻓﻴﻌﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻔﻚ ﺑﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ )‪(٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﻚ ﺑﺮﺍﻍٍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺷﺒﻴﻬﺔ ﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻘﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺭﺃﺳﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻘﻒ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻘﻒ( ﻣﻊ ﻗﻠﺒﻪ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻘﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻒ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ" )ﺹ‪.(٧٨‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻛﻲ ﺗﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬
‫ﺛﺒﺎﺗﺎ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪RCA‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ANALOG‬‬
‫‪PC-1 / DVI-I IN‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪AUDIO OUT‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪AUDIO IN 1‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪DVI-I‬‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫)‪(DVI terminal‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪VGA-DVH-I‬‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫)ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ D-sub‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫‪ ١٥‬ﺳ ًﻨﺎ(‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﻳُﺘﺒﻊ(‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪ D-sub‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ‪ ١٥‬ﺳ ًﻨﺎ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪BNC‬‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ D-sub‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺫﻭ ‪ ١٥‬ﺳ ًﻨﺎ ‪-‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪BNC‬‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪HDBaseT‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ANALOG‬‬
‫‪PC-2 / COMPONENT‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ‪LAN‬‬
‫)‪ CAT5e‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ؛ ﻣﻌﺰﻭﻝ؛‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫‪HDBaseT‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪AUDIO IN 2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪(AV‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪(AV‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫‪RCA‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪D‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪- RCA‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫‪) RCA‬ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪RCA‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻃﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪- D‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪RCA‬‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪RCA‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪HDBaseT‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ANALOG‬‬
‫‪PC-2 / COMPONENT‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪AUDIO IN 2‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ‪LAN‬‬
‫)‪ CAT5e‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ؛ ﻣﻌﺰﻭﻝ؛‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫‪HDBaseT‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪(AV‬‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪AUDIO OUT‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪HDBaseT‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺼﻨﻔﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ CAT5e‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺰﻭﻻ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻼ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﻮﻓﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻜﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ‪ HDBaseT‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ً‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ‪ HDBaseT‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪Left_H١١‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪.(AV‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) POWER‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ]‪/POWER ON‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻈﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪OK‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺃﻭ ‪) EXIT‬ﺧﺮﻭﺝ( ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻷﻭﻝ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪.(AV‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) POWER‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ )ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪/Input‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ[ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪،(AV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪.(AV‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) INPUT‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺑﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺧﻀﺮﺍء ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ ]‪/Digital PC‬ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ[ ﻭ]‪/Analog PC-1‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ‪ [١-‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) INPUT‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ] [ ‪.[ ] /‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [LAN‬ﻛﺈﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪.Canon‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [USB‬ﻛﺈﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪Left_H١‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫‪١٦:١٠ / ١٦:٩‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻗﻄﺮﻳًﺎ(‬
‫‪٤:٣‬‬
‫‪WUX500‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﻗﻄﺮﻳًﺎ(‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬
‫‪٦٠‬‬
‫‪٨٠‬‬
‫‪١٠٠‬‬
‫‪١٥٠‬‬
‫‪٢٠٠‬‬
‫‪٢٥٠‬‬
‫‪٣٠٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ]ﻡ[‬
‫‪١٦:١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮّﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫‪٢٫٢‬‬
‫‪١٫٢‬‬
‫‪٢٫٧‬‬
‫‪١٫٥‬‬
‫‪٣٫٢‬‬
‫‪١٫٨‬‬
‫‪٤٫٣‬‬
‫‪٢٫٤‬‬
‫‪٥٫٤‬‬
‫‪٣٫٠‬‬
‫‪٨٫١‬‬
‫‪٤٫٥‬‬
‫‪١٠٫٨‬‬
‫‪٦٫٠‬‬
‫‪١٣٫٥‬‬
‫‪٧٫٥‬‬
‫‪١٦٫٢‬‬
‫‪٩٫٠‬‬
‫‪١٦:٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫‪١٫٢‬‬
‫‪١٫٥‬‬
‫‪١٫٩‬‬
‫‪٢٫٥‬‬
‫‪٣٫١‬‬
‫‪٤٫٦‬‬
‫‪٦٫٢‬‬
‫‪٧٫٧‬‬
‫‪٩٫٣‬‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫‪٤:٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮّﺏ‬
‫‪٢٫٢‬‬
‫‪٢٫٨‬‬
‫‪٣٫٣‬‬
‫‪٤٫٤‬‬
‫‪٥٫٥‬‬
‫‪٨٫٣‬‬
‫‪١١٫١‬‬
‫‪١٣٫٩‬‬
‫‪١٦٫٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫‪١٫٤‬‬
‫‪١٫٧‬‬
‫‪٢٫٠‬‬
‫‪٢٫٧‬‬
‫‪٣٫٤‬‬
‫‪٥٫١‬‬
‫‪٦٫٨‬‬
‫‪٨٫٥‬‬
‫‪١٠٫٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮّﺏ‬
‫‪٢٫٤‬‬
‫‪٣٫١‬‬
‫‪٣٫٧‬‬
‫‪٤٫٩‬‬
‫‪٦٫١‬‬
‫‪٩٫٢‬‬
‫‪١٢٫٢‬‬
‫‪١٥٫٣‬‬
‫‪١٨٫٣‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ" )ﺹ‪.(٤٦‬‬
‫■ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃ )ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ(‬
‫ﺏ )ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻀﻤﻮ ًﻧﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٪١٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪٪١٣‬‬
‫ﺃ‬
‫ﺃ‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ )ﺃ( ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ )ﺏ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪] ،‬ﺳﻢ[(‬
‫‪WUX500‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻗﻄﺮﻳًﺎ(‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫‪٦٠‬‬
‫‪٨٠‬‬
‫‪١٠٠‬‬
‫‪١٥٠‬‬
‫‪٢٠٠‬‬
‫‪٢٥٠‬‬
‫‪٣٠٠‬‬
‫]ﺳﻢ[‬
‫ﺃ‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫‪٤٨‬‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫‪٨١‬‬
‫‪١٢١‬‬
‫‪١٦٢‬‬
‫‪٢٠٢‬‬
‫‪٢٤٢‬‬
‫‪١٦:١٠‬‬
‫ﺃ‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫‪٦٠‬‬
‫‪٧٥‬‬
‫‪١١٢‬‬
‫‪١٤٩‬‬
‫‪١٨٧‬‬
‫‪٢٢٤‬‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫‪١٦:٩‬‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬
‫ﺃ‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫‪٩١‬‬
‫‪١٣٧‬‬
‫‪١٨٣‬‬
‫‪٢٢٩‬‬
‫‪٢٧٤‬‬
‫‪٤:٣‬‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫‪٥١‬‬
‫‪٦١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٪٦٠+‬‬
‫‪٪١٠±‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ )ﺃ( ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ )ﺏ( ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪Auto PC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪/Analog PC-1‬ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ‪ [١-‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪/Analog PC-2‬ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ‪ ،[٢-‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) AUTO PC‬ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪) Auto PC‬ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻛﺎﻓﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ]‪/Input signal select‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﻴًﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ]‪/Total dots‬ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ[‪ ،‬ﻭ]‪/Tracking‬ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ[‪،‬‬
‫ﻭ]‪/Horizontal position‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ[‪ ،‬ﻭ]‪/Vertical position‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ[‪ ،‬ﻭ]‪/Horizontal pixels‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ[‪ ،‬ﻭ]‪/Vertical pixels‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ[ ﻣﻦ ]‪/Input signal settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩِﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃ ِﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺹ‪ (٣٣‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃ ِﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﺎﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ "ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ" ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﺎ ً‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫"ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ" )ﺹ‪.(٤٣‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻘﺴﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪/Input settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ[‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪/Install settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ[‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪/System settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ[‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪/Network settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ[‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪/Information‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ[‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪/Image adjustment‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ[‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [ ‪ [ ] /‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ً‬
‫ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [ ‪ [ ] /‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [ ‪ [ ] /‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪) Aspect :‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ(‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪/Aspect‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [ ‪ [ ] /‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺃﻭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [ ‪ [ ] /‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪) Contrast :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪/Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [ ‪ [ ] /‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪/Menu position‬ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )‪ (٢‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪) Tracking :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﺐ(‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪/Input signal settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪/Tracking‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﺐ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [ ‪ [ ] /‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [ ‪ [ ] /‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪OK‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) EXIT‬ﺧﺮﻭﺝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺰﺝ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﻲ )‪،(NMPJ‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪.Canon‬‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )‪ (١‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪) Menu position :‬ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪Left_H١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ )ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻓﻀﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪/Screen aspect‬ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ[‬
‫]‪/Aspect‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ[‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪/Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ (AV‬ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [ ‪ [ ] /‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪/Install settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪/Screen aspect‬ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ[ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [ ‪ [ ] /‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [ ‪ [ ] /‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪١٦:١٠‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪.١٦:١٠‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(٥٣‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪١٦:١٠‬‬
‫‪١٦:٩‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪.١٦:٩‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(٥٣‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪١٦:٩‬‬
‫‪٤:٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ .٤:٣‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(٥٣‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪٤:٣‬‬
‫‪٥١‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪) 16:9 D. image shift‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(١٦:٩‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ .١٦:٩‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ‪ /‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) 4:3 D. image shift‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(٤:٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ .٤:٣‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ‪ /‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) KEYSTONE‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻧﻮﻋﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪/‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫■ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ‪/‬ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) KEYSTONE‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪-‬ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺯﺍﺋ ًﺪﺍ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻪ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]‪/4:3 D. image shift‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ [٤:٣‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪/16:9 D. image shift‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) .[١٦:٩‬ﺹ‪(٥٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) KEYSTONE‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) KEYSTONE‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ‬
‫]‪/Keystone reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪/OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪Left_H١‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﺎﻣﺎ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪/HDMI image input‬ﺩﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ [HDMI‬ﻭ]‪/HDBaseT image input‬ﺩﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ [HDBaseT‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪/Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﺃﻭ ]‪/Computer‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫• ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫• ‪Component‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪Image‬‬
‫• ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ‪* HDMI • ٢ / ١-‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫• ‪*HDBaseT‬‬
‫‪) mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ • ‪* HDMI‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫• ‪*HDBaseT‬‬
‫• ‪LAN‬‬
‫• ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬
‫‪Standard‬‬
‫)ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫‪Presentation‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻴﺔ(‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ً‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪Dynamic‬‬
‫)ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ(‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪Photo/sRGB‬‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪(sRGB/‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪sRGB‬‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪sRGB‬‬
‫‪) Video‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫‪٥ - ١ User‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪(٥ - ١‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٣‬ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪/HDMI image input‬ﺩﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪[HDMI‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪/Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٤‬ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪/HDBaseT image input‬ﺩﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪[HDBaseT‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪/Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪/HDMI image input‬ﺩﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ [HDMI‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪/Computer‬ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ[‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪/HDBaseT image input‬ﺩﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪[HDBaseT‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪/Computer‬ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ[‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫■ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) IMAGE‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) IMAGE‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‪) .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪/Image mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ٥ - ١‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪Left_H١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻛﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪/Lamp mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪/Power management mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪/Power Management Duration‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪/Power management mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪/Lamp off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ[ ﺃﻭ ]‪/Standby‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫• ‪/Network Standby Settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ECO‬ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ( ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [ ‪ [ ] /‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٨‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺟﻨﺒًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺴﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) INPUT‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ(‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺍ ﻟﻜﻼ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ )ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺩﺧﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) Split‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪/Input settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SPLIT‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪/Split screen‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ[ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪/On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ "‪ ،"١‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ "‪ ."٢‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ "ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ"‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪/Image priority‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪/Image flip H/V‬ﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ‪/‬ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ[‪ ،‬ﻭ]‪/Screen aspect‬ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ[‪،‬‬
‫ﻭ]‪/Keystone‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ[‪ ،‬ﻭ]‪/Professional settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ[ ﻭ]‪/Logo capture‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) INPUT‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ( ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺫﻱ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺫﻭ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫)ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ( ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺫﻱ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [LAN‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [USB‬ﻛﺈﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺩﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺈﺷﺎﺭﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪Left_H١١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) POWER‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) POWER‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺪﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) POWER‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ‪ ٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‬
‫‪Right_H١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﻧﻈﺮًﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺎ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻏﻤﺲ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎء ﻣﻀﺎﻑ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻋﺼﺮ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺤﻪ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‬
‫ﻳﺤﻤﻲ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺴﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﻌﻴﻖ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ً‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ‪OK‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ً‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻭ‪) POWER‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪) .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪POWER‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "‪Push POWER button again to turn‬‬
‫‪) "off power‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ POWER‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ((‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻒ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻜﻨﺴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ]‪/Yes‬ﻧﻌﻢ[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻭﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪/Air filter warning display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪/Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺸﻄﻒ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﻼء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﺎﻓﺦ ﻫﻮﺍء ً‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺴﻴﺠﺎ ﺧﺸ ًﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺃﻭ ً‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‬
‫‪Left_H١‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺃﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻜﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﻜﺴﻲ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺍء‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪ .‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ‪ (RS-FL02 :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻞ‪RS-FL02 :‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺷﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫‪٦٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫‪Right_H١‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻧﻮﻋﺎﻥ( ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢,٧٠٠‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣,٠٠٠‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣,٠٠٠‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ“ )ﺹ‪.(٦٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪) POWER‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ً‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) POWER‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "‪Push POWER button again to turn off‬‬
‫‪) "power‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ POWER‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ]‪/Lamp counter‬ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪/System settings‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪/Lamp warning display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪/Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﺢ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺑﺂﺧﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﻛﻞ ‪ ٣٠٠٠‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺪﻭﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻵﺧﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﻄﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺑﻮﻗﺖ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻭ‪) POWER‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ً‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) POWER‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "‪Push POWER button again to turn off‬‬
‫‪) "power‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪/No‬ﻻ[ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "‪Do you want to‬‬
‫‪display this message again‬؟" )ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ؟(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪RS-LP08 :‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺮﺍء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺑﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻄﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﻜﺴﻮﺭًﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ .Canon‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻘﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻒ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺷﻈﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺃﺳﻔﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻤﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺎ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ .Canon‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺷﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﺩﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ ،Canon‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻄﻠﺔ" )ﺹ‪.(١٦‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﻓﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﻛﻴﻼ ﺗﻨﺤﺸﺮ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﺻﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﻜﺴﻲ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ]‪/System settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ[ <]‪Other‬‬
‫‪/settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ[ <]‪/Lamp counter‬ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪/Reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ[ ‪/YES] -‬ﻧﻌﻢ[ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ‪ (RS-FL02 :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻓﻼﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪.Canon‬‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫■ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺰﻟﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫‪٦٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪LED‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻀﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ LED‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪LED‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻻﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫‪WARNING‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ( ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫‪) TEMP‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ( ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﺤﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻡ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺪ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺴﺪ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ‪) .‬ﺹ‪،٦١‬‬
‫ﺹ‪ (٦٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫‪WARNING‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ( ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫‪) LAMP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ(‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﻌﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻀﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫‪WARNING‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ( ‪ ٣‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪LAMP‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ( ﻣﻀﻲء‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬
‫ﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻼء‬
‫‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫‪WARNING‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ( )ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪ ٤‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ Canon‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﺪ ًﺩﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫‪WARNING‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ( )ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪ ٥‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻄﻼ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻗﺪ ﺣﺪﺙ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ Canon‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﺪ ًﺩﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪LED‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫‪WARNING‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ( )ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪ ٣‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻻﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ Canon‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﺪ ًﺩﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ‬
‫■ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻼ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ً‬
‫ﻻﻧﺴﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻡ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫]‪/POWER ON‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻋﺎﺋﻖ ﻳﺴﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(٦٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) POWER‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫■ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻼ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺕ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪ (AV‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪) .‬ﺹ‪ - ٣٦‬ﺹ‪(٣٨‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﺗﻤﺮ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ‪) .‬ﺹ‪ ،٢٨‬ﺹ‪(٣٠‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪.(AV‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪(AV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AV‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ (AV‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪/INPUT‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ[‪) .‬ﺹ‪(٤١‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺎ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪BLANK‬‬
‫)ﻓﺎﺭﻍ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) BLANK‬ﻓﺎﺭﻍ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪ [LCD‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [VGA‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Fn‬ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ،Windows 7 / Windows 8 / Windows 8.1‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪Windows‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪.[P‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ٨٦٤٠ × ١٠٩١٢‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻳﺖ ﻭﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪.FAT‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻼ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) LAN‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻣﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻐﻠﻒ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) LAN‬ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻣﺠﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻌﺰﻭﻝ( ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪) .‬ﺹ‪ ،٣٦‬ﺹ‪(٣٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) MUTE‬ﻛﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MUTE‬ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺹ‪(٢٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) VOL‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ VOL+‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺹ‪ ،٢٨‬ﺹ‪(٣٠‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ Audio In‬ﻫﻮ ]‪/Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ Audio In‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(٤٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(٤٢‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(٥٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺫﻱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺫﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﺒﺨﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(٦١‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﺐ ﺳﻲء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪/Auto PC‬ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫]‪/Tracking‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﺐ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻘﻒ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪/Image flip H/V‬ﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ‪/‬ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪/Install settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻂ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ١٦٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.BNC‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻂ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ١٦٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫■ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻣﺘﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻣﺴﺪﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺴﺪ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ‪) .‬ﺹ‪ ،٦١‬ﺹ‪(٦٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺮ‬
‫)ﺃﻭ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻄﻠﺔ“ )ﺹ‪.(١٦‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(١٩‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ٢٣٠٠‬ﻡ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪/Install settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫]‪/Fan mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ]‪/Professional settings‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪/High altitude‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻡ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻡ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ]‪/WARNING‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ[ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ]‪/TEMP‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ[‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎﻥ‪ (.‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺴﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻲ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻡ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺹ‪ ،٢٩‬ﺹ‪(٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫■ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻧﻔﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(٢٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤُﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤُﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(٢٦‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺎﺋﻖ ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ٍ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺎ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻮء ﻗﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(٢٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪/Remote control channel‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪/System settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪/Key lock‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ[ ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪/System settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪Key‬‬
‫‪/lock‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪/Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫■ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪WUX500‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ /‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﻄﺎﺑﻲ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻮﺷﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ /‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ )‪ ٣ / (LCOS‬ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ /‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫‪١٦:١٠ / "٠٫٧١‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‪ /‬ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫‪ ٣ × ١٢٠٠ × ١٩٢٠) ٢٫٣٠٤٫٠٠٠‬ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ( ‪٦٫٩١٢٫٠٠٠ /‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪/‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ ٣٩٫٠ – ٢١٫٧ / × ١٫٨‬ﻣﻢ ‪ /‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ‪٢٫٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪ /‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ‪ /‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٪٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) ٪٦٠+‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬
‫ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ‪) ٪١٠± :‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ 250-NSHA‬ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ‪ ٢٦٠‬ﻭﺍﻁ ‪ ٢٠٠ /‬ﻭﺍﻁ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ‪ /‬ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫)ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٫٢‬ﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٦٫٢‬ﻡ(‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ ١٦٫٧٧٠٫٠٠٠‬ﻟﻮﻥ )ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ*‪) ٢*١‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ(‬
‫‪ ٥٠٠٠‬ﻟﻮﻣﻦ‬
‫‪) ٢٠٠٠:١‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪:‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ(‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫‪٪٩٠‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻭﺍﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫‪ ١٢٠٠ × ١٩٢٠‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ ‪ PC‬ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ‬
‫‪ WUXGA‬ﻭ‪ WSXGA+‬ﻭ‪ UXGA‬ﻭ‪ WXGA+‬ﻭ‪ SXGA+‬ﻭ‪SXGA‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ WXGA‬ﻭ‪ XGA‬ﻭ‪ SVGA‬ﻭ‪VGA‬‬
‫)ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪ :‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ‪ ١٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٧٥‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ،‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٨٥‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ ‪ PC‬ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫‪ WUXGA‬ﻭ‪ WSXGA+‬ﻭ‪ UXGA‬ﻭ‪ WXGA+‬ﻭ‪ SXGA+‬ﻭ‪SXGA‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ WXGA‬ﻭ‪ XGA‬ﻭ‪ SVGA‬ﻭ‪VGA‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ ‪HDMI / HDBaseT‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ WUXGA‬ﻭ‪ WSXGA+‬ﻭ‪ UXGA‬ﻭ‪ WXGA+‬ﻭ‪ SXGA+‬ﻭ‪SXGA‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ WXGA‬ﻭ‪ XGA‬ﻭ‪ SVGA‬ﻭ‪VGA‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 1080p‬ﻭ‪ 1080i‬ﻭ‪ 720p‬ﻭ‪ 576p‬ﻭ‪480p‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ 1080PsF‬ﻭ‪ 1080p‬ﻭ‪ 1080i‬ﻭ‪ 720p‬ﻭ‪ 576p‬ﻭ‪ 576i‬ﻭ‪ 480p‬ﻭ‪480i‬‬
‫‪٧٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ‪ :RGP‬ﻋﺎﻛﺴﺔ )‪ ٣ :(LCOS‬ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪DVI-I‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ DVI‬ﺑﻪ ‪ ٢٩‬ﺳ ًﻨﺎ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪) HDMI‬ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻤﻴﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ANALOG PC /‬‬
‫‪COMPONENT‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ )ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ D-sub‬ﺫﻭ ‪ ١٥‬ﺳ ًﻨﺎ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪HDBaseT‬‬
‫‪RJ-45‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪LAN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﻲ )‪10BASE-T / 100BASE-T (RJ-45‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ‪) JPEG‬ﻓﺌﺔ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪CONTROL‬‬
‫‪) RS-232C‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ D-sub‬ﺫﻭ ‪ ٩‬ﺳﻨﻮﻥ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪REMOTE‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻄﺮﻩ ‪(٣٫٥‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪AUDIO IN‬‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪ ٢‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪(٣٫٥‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪AUDIO OUT‬‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫‪WUX500‬‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪(٣٫٥‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫‪) TMDS‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ(‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ‬
‫‪ ،0.7Vp-p‬ﻗﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ = ‪٧٥‬ﻭﺍﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻨﻄﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻧﺰﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪-‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻧﺰﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪ ،0.3Vp-p :G‬ﻗﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ = ‪٧٥‬ﻭﺍﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ :COMPONENT‬ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪ Y Cb/Pb Cr/Pr‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫‪ ،1Vp-p :Y‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ = ‪٧٥‬ﻭﺍﻁ‬
‫‪ ،0.7Vp-p :Cb/Pb‬ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ = ‪٧٥‬ﻭﺍﻁ‬
‫‪ ،0.7Vp-p :Cr/Pr‬ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ = ‪٧٥‬ﻭﺍﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ = ‪ ٤٧‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻭﺍﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫‪ ٣٠ / ٣٧‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪/‬ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٤٠ -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٦٥‬ﻭﺍﻁ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٩٥‬ﻭﺍﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ٦٠/ ٥٠ -‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭ‪HDBaseT‬‬
‫‪ ٠٫٢‬ﻭﺍﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪HDBaseT‬‬
‫‪ ٠٫٦‬ﻭﺍﻁ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪HDBaseT‬‬
‫‪ ١٫١‬ﻭﺍﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻭ‪HDBaseT‬‬
‫‪ ١٫٥‬ﻭﺍﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ً‬
‫)ﺷﺎﻣﻼ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻭﺯ(‬
‫‪ ٣٣٧‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﺮﺽ( × ‪ ١٣٦‬ﻣﻢ )ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( × ‪ ٣٧٠‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻠﺔ‬
‫‪ ٥٫٩‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ( ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫‪٧٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫‪WUX500‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ‬
‫‪IEEE802.11b/g/n‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪ ١١ -‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫‪ ٢٫٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ISO21118-2012‬‬
‫* ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ٪٩٩٫٩٩‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ٪٠٫٠١‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫* ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺎﺭﻉ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫‪RS-RC06‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ ٣٫٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪AAA‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٨‬ﻡ ‪ ٢٥±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ﻭﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ )ﺣﺘﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ ٥٦‬ﺟﻢ‬
‫■ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫‪WUX500‬‬
‫‪ ٧٢‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ٣٦٢‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ٩١٫٥‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ١١٨‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ١٣٦‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ٣٧٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ٣٠١‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ٣٣٧‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ٣٣‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ١٤٤٫٥‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ٢٨٩‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ١٤٤٫٥‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ )‪ ٤‬ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ (M6‬ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫‪ ٤٣‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﺮﺽ( ‪ ٢٣ x‬ﻣﻢ )ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪ ١٣٥ x‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ‪RS-LP08 :‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻒ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ‪RS-CL14 :‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻘﻒ‬
‫)‪ ٦٠٠ - ٤٠٠‬ﻣﻢ(‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ‪*RS-CL08 :‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻘﻒ‬
‫)‪ ١٠٠٠ - ٦٠٠‬ﻣﻢ(‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ‪*RS-CL09 :‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ‪RS-FL02 :‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ‪RS-RC05 :‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ‪RS-RC06 :‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ‪RS-FT01 :‬‬
‫* ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻒ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
CANON INC.
30-2 Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, T
CANON EUROPA N.V.
www.canon-europe.com/Contact_Us/canon_europe_middle_east_and_africa_offices/
©CANON INC.2015
©CANON INC.2015
CEL-SW2KA2N0
CEL-SW2JA2N0
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising